The Western Australian Curriculum and Assessment Outline (The Outline) is now available to all schools.  It sets out the knowledge, understandings, skills, values and attitudes that students are expected to acquire, and guidelines for the assessment of student achievement.  It also highlights how the Western Australian Curriculum relates to the Australian Curriculum and the Early Years Learning Framework.  The Outline is for all students from Kindergarten to Year 10.  Government of Western Australia – Department of Education

Due to the progressive nature of the new Australian Curriculum implementation, the FutureSchool system offers both the Australian Curriculum and the Western Australian Curriculum and Assessment Outline for your family or school. This will remain in place until the full rollout and integration has been completed.

Whatever level your family, you can rest assured that FutureSchool will complement and work hand-in-hand with their current schoolwork.

For those schools that offer the International Baccalaureate or Cambridge International Examinations curricula, these are also available within FutureSchool as part of its standard curriculum library.

To see more detail about lessons covered within our subjects, just click on your state from the list:

Mathematics

Literacy





Mathematics

WA Kindergarten Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Kindergarten
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Using and applying number The numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4 The number system Ordinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
8 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
9 Exam Exam – WA Kindergarten
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 1 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 1
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number The numbers 1 to 5
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write and identify the words and numerals for the numbers 1 to 5
3 Using and applying number The numbers 6 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match cardinal words and numbers with groups of 6-9 objects.
4 The number system Ordinal numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to match ordinal words and numbers with groups of 1-9 objects.
5 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
6 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
7 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
8 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
9 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
10 Time, days of week Days of the week
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name the days of the week in order, recognise them in a written form, be able to answer questions about the days of the week, and have an understanding of a diary.
11 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
12 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
13 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
14 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
15 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
16 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
17 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
18 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
19 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
20 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
21 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
22 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
23 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
24 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
25 Exam Exam – WA Year 1
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 2 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 2
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
3 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
4 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
5 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
6 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
7 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
8 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
9 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
10 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
11 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
12 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
13 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
14 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
15 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
16 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
17 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
18 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
19 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
20 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
21 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
22 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
23 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
24 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
25 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
26 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
27 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
28 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
29 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
30 Exam Exam – WA Year 2
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 3 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 3
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
3 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
4 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
5 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
6 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
7 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
8 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
9 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
10 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
11 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
12 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
13 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
14 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
15 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
16 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
17 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
18 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
19 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
20 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
21 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
22 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
23 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
24 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
25 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
26 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
27 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
28 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
29 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
30 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
31 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
32 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
33 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
34 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
35 Exam Exam – WA Year 3
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 4 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 4
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences that show numbers adding up to another number.
3 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
4 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences up to the number 10.
5 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
6 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
7 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
8 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
9 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
10 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
11 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
12 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
13 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
14 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
15 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
16 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
17 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
18 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
19 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
20 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
21 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
22 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
23 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
24 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
25 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
26 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
27 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
28 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
29 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
30 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
31 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
32 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
33 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
34 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
35 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
36 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
37 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
38 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
39 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
40 Time, months Months and seasons of the year
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and order the months of the year, know the number of days in each month, name the seasons in order, and know the number of months in each season.
41 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
42 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
43 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
44 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
45 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
46 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
47 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
48 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
49 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
50 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
51 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
52 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
53 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
54 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
55 Exam Exam – WA Year 4
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 5 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 5
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
3 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
4 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
5 Subtraction Subtraction with borrowing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to record subtraction number sentences and will understand the need to trade between place value columns using the renaming method
6 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
7 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
8 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
9 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
10 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
11 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
12 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
13 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
14 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
15 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
16 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
17 Decimals Introduction to decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent decimals to two decimal places.
18 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
19 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
20 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
21 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
22 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
23 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
24 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
25 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
26 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
27 Addition Addition up to the number 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to solve and record addition problems with three digit numbers.
28 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 999 using the renaming method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know another way to trade between columns in subtraction using the renaming method. The student will also learn how to solve number sentences with missing numbers.
29 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
30 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
31 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
32 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
33 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
34 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
35 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
36 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
37 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
38 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
39 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
40 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
41 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
42 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
43 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
44 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
45 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
46 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
47 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
48 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
49 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
50 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
51 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
52 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
53 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
54 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
55 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
56 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
57 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
58 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
59 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
60 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
61 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
62 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
63 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
64 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
65 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
66 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
67 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
68 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
69 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
70 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
71 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
72 Exam Exam – WA Year 5
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 6 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 6
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
3 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
4 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
6 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
7 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
8 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
11 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
12 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
13 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
14 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 20.
15 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 and no remainders.
16 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
17 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
18 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
19 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
20 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
21 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
22 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
23 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
24 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
25 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
26 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
27 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
28 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
29 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
30 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
31 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
32 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
33 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
34 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
35 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
36 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
37 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
38 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
39 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
40 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
41 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
42 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
43 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
44 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
45 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
46 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
47 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
48 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
49 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
50 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
51 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
52 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
53 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
54 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
55 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
56 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
57 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
58 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
59 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
60 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
61 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
62 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
63 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
64 Weight/mass The tonne – converting units and problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to: choose the correct unit to measure the mass of small, medium or large objects, and convert measurements from one unit to another.
65 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
66 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
67 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
68 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
69 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
70 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
71 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
72 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
73 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
74 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
75 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
76 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
77 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
78 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
79 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
80 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
81 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
82 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
83 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
84 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
85 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
86 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
87 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
88 Exam Exam – WA Year 6
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 7 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 7
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
3 Counting and numeration Addition to 9999 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the student’s knowledge of place value to solve addition problems with 3, 4 and 5 digit numbers and word problems.
4 Subtraction Subtraction involving four digit numbers and beyond using the renaming method.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use written methods to solve subtraction problems involving 4 and 5 digit whole numbers.
5 Counting and numeration Seven digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value knowledge to read and write seven digit whole numbers.
6 Multiplication Multiplication using extended algorithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have understood multiplication using extended algorithms.
7 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
8 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
9 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
10 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
11 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by multiple of 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any multiple of 10 using the process of long multiplication.
12 Multiplication Multiplying 3 and 4-digit numbers by multiples of 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 3 or 4 digit numbers by any multiple of 100 using long multiplication.
13 Multiplication Multiplying 2-digit numbers by 2-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 2 digit number by any other 2 digit number.
14 Multiplication Multiplying 4-digit numbers by 3-digit numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply any 4 digit numbers by any 3 digit numbers using long multiplication.
15 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
16 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
17 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
18 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
19 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
20 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
21 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
22 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
23 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
24 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
25 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
26 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
27 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
28 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
29 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
30 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
31 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
32 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
33 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
34 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
35 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
36 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
37 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
38 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
39 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
40 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
41 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
42 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
43 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
44 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
45 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
46 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
47 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
48 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
49 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
50 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
51 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
52 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
53 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
54 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
55 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
56 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 2, 3 and 4 with divisors greater than 20 with no remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 2,3,4 where divisors are greater than 20 and there are no remainders.
57 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2 and 3 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 1,2,3 where the divisors are less than 20 and there are remainders.
58 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 with divisors less than 20 with remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division with repeated subtraction by multiples of 10 where the divisors are greater than 12 and less than 20, and the dividend is any 3 digit number, and there are remainders.
59 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 with remainders as fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 20 and remainders expressed as fractions
60 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35 with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 35, with some remainders.
61 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 with dividends of 3 and 4-digits with some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use long division by repeated subtraction with divisors less than 55 and where dividends are 3 and 4 digit numbers, and there are some remainders.
62 Division/repeat subtraction Repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 with dividends of thousands and some remainders
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to use Long Division by repeated subtraction with divisors greater than 50 including division of thousands, and some remainders.
63 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
64 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
65 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
66 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
67 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
68 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
69 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
70 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
71 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
72 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
73 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
74 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
75 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
76 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
77 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
78 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
79 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
80 Equations Problem solving strategies
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recall the steps in a strategy for solving word problems.
81 Number problems Problems with numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with numbers using a problem solving strategy.
82 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
83 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
84 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
85 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
86 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
87 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
88 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
89 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
90 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
91 Exam Exam – WA Year 7
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 8 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 8
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
3 Division Dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand dividing two and three digit numbers by a single digit number.
4 Multiplication Multiplication by 2 and 3 digits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record 2 and 3 digit multiplication problems in extended and short form.
5 Division Divide whole numbers by a 2 digit divisor
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve and record division problems with whole numbers using a two-digit divisor and show any remainders as a fraction.
6 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
7 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
8 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
9 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
10 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
11 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
12 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
13 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
14 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
15 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
16 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
17 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
18 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
19 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
20 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
21 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using kilolitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the formal units of measurement for volume and capacity for bigger objects. The student will also be able to use the knowledge of volume to work out capacity.
22 Capacity Estimate, measure and compare the capacity of containers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know why and when we might need to estimate and a way to go about it.
23 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
24 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
25 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
26 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
27 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
28 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
29 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
30 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
31 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
32 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
33 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
34 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
35 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
36 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
37 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
38 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
39 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
40 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
41 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
42 Decimals Decimals to three decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express thousandths as a decimal and interpret decimal notation for thousandths.
43 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
44 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
45 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
46 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
47 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
48 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
49 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
50 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
51 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
52 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
53 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
54 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
55 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
56 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
57 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
58 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
59 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
60 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
61 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
62 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
63 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
64 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
65 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
66 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
67 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
68 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
69 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
70 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
71 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
72 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
73 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
74 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
75 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
76 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
77 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
78 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
79 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
80 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
81 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
82 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
83 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
84 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
85 Exam Exam – WA Year 8
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 9 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 9
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
3 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
4 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
5 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
6 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
7 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
8 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
9 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
11 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
12 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
13 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
14 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
15 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
16 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
17 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
18 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
19 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
20 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
21 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
22 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
23 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
24 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
25 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
26 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
27 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
28 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
29 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
30 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
31 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
32 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
33 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
34 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
35 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
36 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
37 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
38 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
39 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
40 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
41 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
42 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
43 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
44 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
45 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
46 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
47 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
48 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
49 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
50 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
51 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
52 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
53 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
54 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
55 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
56 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
57 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
58 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
59 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
60 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
61 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
62 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
63 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
64 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
65 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
66 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
67 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
68 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
69 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
70 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
71 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
72 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
73 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
74 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
75 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
76 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
77 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
78 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
79 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
80 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
81 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
82 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
83 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
84 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
85 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
86 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
87 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
88 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
89 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
90 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
91 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
92 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
93 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
94 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
95 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
96 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
97 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
98 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
99 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
100 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
101 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
102 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
103 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
104 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
105 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
106 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
107 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
108 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
109 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
110 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
111 Exam Exam – WA Year 9
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 9 Extension Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 9 Extension
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
3 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
4 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
5 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
6 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
7 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
8 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
9 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
10 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
11 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
12 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
13 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
14 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
15 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
16 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
17 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
18 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
19 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
20 Fractions Multiplying and dividing to obtain equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: obtain equivalent fractions using a number line or diagram, develop mental strategies to obtain equivalent fractions, and reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form.
21 Fractions Reducing fractions to lowest equivalent form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to reduce a fraction to its lowest equivalent form by dividing the numerator and denominator by a common factor.
22 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
23 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
24 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
25 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
26 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
27 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
28 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
29 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
30 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
31 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
32 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
33 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
34 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
35 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
36 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
37 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
38 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
39 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
40 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
41 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
42 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
43 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
44 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
45 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
46 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
47 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
48 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
49 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
50 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
51 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
52 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
53 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
54 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
55 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
56 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
57 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
58 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
59 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
60 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
61 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
62 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
63 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
64 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
65 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
66 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
67 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
68 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
69 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
70 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
71 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
72 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
73 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
74 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
75 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
76 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
77 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
78 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
79 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
80 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
81 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
82 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
83 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
84 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
85 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
86 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
87 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
88 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
89 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
90 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
91 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
92 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
93 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
94 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
95 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
96 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
97 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
98 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
99 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
100 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
101 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
102 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
103 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
104 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
105 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
106 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
107 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
108 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
109 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
110 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
111 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
112 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
113 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
114 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
115 Exam Exam – WA Year 9 Extension
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 10 Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 10
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Fractions Multiplying mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply mixed numbers (mixed numerals) and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
3 Fractions Finding reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the reciprocals of fractions and mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
4 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
5 Fractions Dividing mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide mixed numbers (mixed numerals).
6 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
7 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
8 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
9 Length Problems with length.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with length.
10 Mass Problems with mass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with mass.
11 Area Problems with area.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with area.
12 Volume/capacity Problems with volume/capacity.
Objective: Problem Solving: problems involving volume/capacity
13 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
14 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
15 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
16 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
17 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
18 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
19 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
20 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
21 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
22 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
23 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
24 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
25 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
26 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
27 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
28 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
29 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
30 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
31 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
32 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
33 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
34 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
35 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
36 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
37 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
38 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
39 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
40 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
41 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
42 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
43 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
44 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
45 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
46 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
47 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
48 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
49 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
50 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
51 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
52 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
53 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
54 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
55 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
56 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
57 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
58 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
59 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
60 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
61 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
62 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
63 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
64 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
65 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
66 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
67 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
68 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
69 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
70 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
71 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
72 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
73 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
74 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
75 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
76 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
77 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
78 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
79 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
80 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
81 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
82 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
83 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
84 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
85 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
86 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
87 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
88 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
89 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
90 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
91 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
92 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
93 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
94 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
95 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
96 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
97 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
98 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
99 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
100 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
101 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
102 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
103 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
104 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
105 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
106 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
107 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
108 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
109 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
110 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
111 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
112 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
113 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
114 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
115 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
116 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
117 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
118 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
119 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
120 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
121 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
122 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
123 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
124 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
125 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
126 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
127 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
128 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
129 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
130 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
131 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
132 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
133 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
134 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
135 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
136 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
137 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
138 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
139 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
140 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
141 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
142 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
143 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
144 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
145 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
146 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
147 Exam Exam – WA Year 10
Objective: Exam
Go to top

WA Year 10 Extension Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Study plan – WA Year 10 Extension
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
3 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
4 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
5 Decimals Dividing numbers by a decimal fraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide numbers by a decimal fraction.
6 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
7 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
8 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
9 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
10 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
11 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
12 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
13 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
14 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
15 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
16 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
17 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
18 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
19 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
20 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
21 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
22 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
23 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
24 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
25 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
26 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
27 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
28 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
29 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
30 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
31 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
32 Area Area of a trapezium.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of all types of different shaped trapeziums using a given formula.
33 Area Area of a rhombus.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: identify a rhombus, learn how to find the formula for the area of a rhombus, and use it in solving problems.
34 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
35 Area Area of regular polygons and composite figures.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
36 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
37 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
38 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
39 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
40 Time, distance, speed Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand what is meant by the speed of an object, read the instantaneous speed of a vehicle on a speedometer and find the average speed of an object.
41 Time zones Time zones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise that there are different time zones, compare time zones, understand daylight saving and adjust times accordingly, and determine the local time in different regions.
42 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
43 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
44 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
45 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
46 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
47 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
48 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
49 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
50 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
51 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
52 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
53 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
54 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
55 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
56 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
57 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
58 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
59 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
60 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
61 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
62 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
63 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
64 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
65 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
66 Geometry-angles Measuring angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure any angle between 0 and 360 degrees using a protractor, and identify what type of angle it is.
67 Geometry-angles Adjacent angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the parts of an angle, what adjacent angles are and how they are used to solve simple angle problems.
68 Geometry-angles Complementary and supplementary angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Complementary and Supplementary Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
69 Geometry-angles Vertically opposite angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Vertically Opposite Angles and use this knowledge to solve simple geometric angle problems.
70 Geometry-angles Angles at a Point.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify Angles at a Point and use this knowledge and other angles concepts to solve simple geometric angle problems.
71 Geometry-angles Parallel Lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify corresponding, co-interior and alternate angles.
72 Geometry-problems Additional questions involving parallel lines
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to complete two step parallel line questions, and identify other ways to solve them.
73 Geometry-triangles Angle sum of a triangle
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will able to identify and use the angle sum of a triangle theorem to solve geometric problems.
74 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
75 Coordinate Geometry-midpoint, slope Mid-point formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the mid point formula and use it practically.
76 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
77 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
78 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
79 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
80 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
81 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
82 Co-ordinate Geometry-Inequalities Inequalities on the number plane.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the expression for an inequality given its graph. The student will also be able to solve some problems using inequalities.
83 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
84 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
85 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
86 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
87 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
88 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
89 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
90 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
91 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
92 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
93 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
94 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
95 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
96 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
97 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
98 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
99 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
100 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
101 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
102 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
103 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
104 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
105 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
106 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
107 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
108 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
109 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
110 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
111 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
112 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
113 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
114 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
115 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
116 Surds Some rules for the operations with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for division and multiplication of surds.
117 Surds Simplifying surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the rules for simplifying surds using division and multiplication.
118 Surds Creating entire surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write numbers as entire surds and compare numbers by writing as entire surds
119 Surds Adding and subtracting like surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract surds and simplify expressions by collecting like surds.
120 Surds Expanding surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and then simplify binomial expressions involving surds.
121 Surds Binomial expansions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify the squares of binomial sums and differences involving surds.
122 Surds Conjugate binomials with surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand and simplify conjugate binomial expressions involving surds.
123 Surds Rationalising the denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves surds.
124 Surds Rationalising binomial denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to rationalise denominators of fractions where the denominator involves binomial expressions.
125 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
126 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
127 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
128 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
129 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
130 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
131 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
132 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
133 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
134 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
135 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
136 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
137 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
138 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
139 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
140 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
141 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
142 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
143 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
144 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
145 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
146 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
147 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
148 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
149 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
150 Algebra-polynomials Introduction to polynomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand all the terminology associated with polynomials and be able to judge if any algebraic expression is a polynomial or not.
151 Algebra-polynomials The sum, difference and product of two polynomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add subtract and multiply polynomials and find the degrees of the answers.
152 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
153 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log x to the base 3 = 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the number from which the logarithm evolves.
154 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations of type log 32 to the base x = 5.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the definition of a logarithm and how to use it to find an unknown variable which in this case is the base from which the number came.
155 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
156 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
157 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
158 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
159 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
160 Circle Geometry Theorem – The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord. Theorem – The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular to the chord.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The perpendicular from the centre of a circle to a chord bisects the chord.’ and its converse theorem ‘The line from the centre of a circle to the mid-point of the chord is perpendicular’
161 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centres. Theorem – Chords in a circle which are equidistant from the centre are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that equal chords in equal circles are equidistant from the centre.
162 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
163 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
164 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
165 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
166 Circle Geometry Theorem – The exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the exterior angle at a vertex of a cyclic quadrilateral equals the interior opposite.
167 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
168 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
169 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
170 Exam Exam – WA Year 10 Extension
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit PAMAT - Yr11 (Opt 1) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit PAMAT – Yr11 (Opt 1)
Objective: Assessment
2 Using and applying number Zero and counting numbers 1 to 9
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, write and match the numeral and word for the number zero.
3 Using and applying number The number 10
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the number 10, count up to 10 objects and to match a group of objects to the correct number.
4 Using and applying number Numbers 11 to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write the numeral and word for the numbers 11 to 20, count up to 20 and match a group of objects to the correct number.
5 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
6 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
7 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
8 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
9 Time, duration Duration
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and measure the duration of an event using informal units, and compare and order the duration of an event using informal units.
10 Time, minutes Analogue – Telling time – minutes in the hour
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognize the coordinated movements of the hands on an analogue clock.
11 Time, units Units of time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units of time and read and interpret simple timetables, timelines and calendars.
12 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
13 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
14 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
15 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
16 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
17 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
18 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
19 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
20 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
21 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
22 Exam Exam – Unit PAMAT – Yr11 (Opt 1)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit PBMAT - Yr12 (Opt 1) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit PBMAT – Yr12 (Opt 1)
Objective: Assessment
2 Using and applying number Using place value to order numbers up to 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to order numbers up to the value of 20.
3 Reasoning Simple addition up to the number 20
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write simple number sentences and also write addition in a vertical format using numbers up to 20.
4 Calculations Subtraction by Comparison
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate take away or subtraction number sentences by comparison methods.
5 Calculations Subtraction up to the number 20 and beyond
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of subtraction using tens and units and calculating the answer to take away or subtraction number sentences.
6 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using equal groups
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows and will understand how to count them.
7 Calculation-grouping Multiplication using repeated addition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to write about equal groups and rows using another method and also learn different ways to count them.
8 Calculation-multiplication The multiplication sign
Objective: on completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply single numbers to solve multiplication problems.
9 Calculation sharing/division Strategies for division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to share objects equally and will also learn how to write about them.
10 Calculation-multiples Multiples of 10 up to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read, write, rename and add multiples of ten.
11 Calculations The numbers 20 to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify, name and add groups of ten, counting to ninety-nine.
12 Calculation 10-100 Counting by 1, 2, 5, and 10 to 100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to skip count to one hundred and show that one hundred equals ten times ten.
13 Calculation-larger numbers The numbers 100 to 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
14 Addition Addition to 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use place value to add two 2-digit numbers together up to a total of 99.
15 Subtraction Subtraction up to the number 99
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to find the answer to take away number sentences with bigger numbers and will also know how to write these number sentences.
16 Subtraction Subtraction of two-digit numbers Involving comparison.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve and record the answer to word problems and will understand how estimation helps to find out if an answer is correct.
17 Multiplication Multiplication – important facts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know the connection between multiplication and division and recognise the strategies to help solve multiplication number sentences.
18 Problems Solve and record division using known facts and sharing
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use sharing concepts to solve and record division problems.
19 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
20 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
21 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
22 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
23 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
24 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
25 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
26 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
27 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
28 Time, digital O’clock and half past using digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on a digital clock.
29 Time, analogue O’clock and half past on the analogue clock
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the terms ‘o’clock’ and ‘half past’, and read hour and half-hour time on an analogue clock.
30 Length Compare length by using informal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure objects around the student’s home and compare their length to each other. The student will also be able to compare the different ways the student measured the same object.
31 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
32 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
33 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
34 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
35 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
36 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
37 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
38 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
39 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
40 Exam Exam – Unit PBMAT – Yr12 (Opt 1)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 1AMAT - Yr11 (Opt 2-3) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 1AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 2-3)
Objective: Assessment
2 Place value The numbers 1000 to 9999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 999, skip count by 10s and 100s to 999 and use pictures or objects to represent the numbers 100 to 999.
3 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe part of a whole
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name fractions, and use fractions to describe equal parts of a whole.
4 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
5 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
6 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
7 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
8 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
9 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
10 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
11 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
12 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
13 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
14 Sign word problems Solving Word Problems by recognising Sign Words
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems by recognising Sign Words that identify which operation to use: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division.
15 Division Division with and without a remainder.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand division with and without a Remainder.
16 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
17 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
18 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
19 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
20 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
21 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
22 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
23 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
24 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
25 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
26 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
27 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
28 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
29 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
30 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
31 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
32 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
33 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
34 Lines and angles Describing position.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand conventional location language to describe position.
35 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
36 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
37 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
38 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
39 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
40 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
41 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
42 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
43 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
44 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
45 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
46 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
47 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
48 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
49 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
50 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
51 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
52 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
53 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
54 Exam Exam – Unit 1AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 2-3)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 1BMAT - Yr11 (Opt 3-4) Yr12 (Opt 2) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 1BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 3-4) Yr12 (Opt 2)
Objective: Assessment
2 Counting and numeration The numbers 10 000 to 99 999
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to count to 99 999 and use place value to read the value of the numerals within the larger numbers.
3 Fractions Using fractions 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 to describe parts of a group or collection
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the fractions to describe equal parts of a collection of objects.
4 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order fractions with the same number of equal parts, and compare and order fractions with a different number of equal parts.
5 Fractions mixed numbers (mixed numerals)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: name and recognise mixed numbers (mixed numerals), count by halves and quarters, and use a number line to represent halves and quarters beyond one.
6 Fractions Improper fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use diagrams and number lines to recognise and represent mixed numbers and improper fractions, and develop strategies for changing improper fractions to mixed numbers and vice versa, mentally.
7 Fractions Fractions 1/5, 1/10, 1/100
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: compare fractions with the denominators 5, 10, 100, and represent fractions with the denominator 5, 10, 100.
8 Fractions Finding equivalent fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to name and find fractions that represent equal amounts between halves, quarters and eighths – using diagrams and number lines.
9 Decimals Comparing and ordering decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to compare and order decimals to two decimal places and understand decimal notation to two places.
10 Decimals Decimals with whole numbers 10th and 100th
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use and understand place value to show whole numbers, tenths and hundredths as decimals.
11 Percentages Introduction to percentages, including relating common fractions to percentages
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise that the symbol % means ‘per cent’ and relate common fractions to a percentage.
12 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
13 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
14 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
15 Decimals Adding decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
16 Decimals Subtracting decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with the same number of decimal places (to two decimal places)
17 Decimals Using decimals – shopping problems
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read and interpret problems involving money, interpret the everyday use of decimals, and perform calculations with money.
18 Decimals Using decimals to record length
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to interpret the everyday use of fractions and decimals and use their knowledge of decimals to record measurements.
19 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
20 Money Problems involving money
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with money.
21 Time, a.m. p.m. AM and PM time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to talk about am and pm time and use the correct notation for am and pm time.
22 Time, quarter to, past Quarter past and quarter to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to associate the numerals 3, 6 and 9 with 15, 30 and 45 minutes, and use the terms ‘quarter to’ and ‘quarter past’.
23 Time, minutes past the hour Minutes past
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes past the hour on an analogue clock.
24 Time, minutes to the hour Minutes to
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand and read the minutes to the hour on an analogue clock.
25 Time, digital, analogue Comparing analogue and digital time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: read analogue and digital clocks to the minute, be familiar with the recording of digital time, and tell the same time using both analogue and digital clocks.
26 Time, 24-hour 24 hour time
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: tell the time accurately using twenty-four hour time, change the time from am and pm time to twenty-four hour time, and change the time from twenty-four hour time to am and pm time.
27 Length Using the metre as a formal unit to measure perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the perimeter of different shapes in metres.
28 Length Using the formal unit of the centimetre to measure length and perimeter
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to measure length and perimeter in centimetres.
29 Length Read and calculate distances on a map using the formal unit kilometre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to read distances in kilometres and calculate total distances between different locations on a map.
30 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
31 Weight/mass Introducing the concept of mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concepts of mass.
32 Weight/mass The kilogram
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know: how to use the kilogram as a measure of mass., and how to weigh items accurately using scales.
33 Weight/mass The gram and net mass
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand: why there’s a zero button on digital scales, how to zero some other types of scales, and also how to measure mass in grams.
34 Volume Introduction to volume. using the cubic centimetre as a standard unit
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a formal unit to measure volume, use the abbreviation for cubic centimetre, construct three dimensional objects using cubic centimetre blocks, and use counting to determine vo
35 3-D shapes Constructing models.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: Construct rectangular prisms using cubic centimetre blocks and counting to determine volume. Explain the advantages of using a cube to measure volume. Construct different rectangular prisms.
36 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
37 Capacity Using the cubic cm and displacement to measure volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know a way to find volume and capacity.
38 Capacity Using the cubic cm as a standard unit of measurement for volume and capacity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand what a cubic centimetre is and how it can be used to find out the volume and capacity of a three dimensional shape.
39 Capacity The relationship between the common units of capacity, the litre and the millilitre
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the relationship between the two common units of capacity, the litre and millilitre.
40 Area Introduction to the square centimetre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the area in square centimetres of surfaces or objects and record their results correctly.
41 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
42 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
43 Area Comparing and ordering areas.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to estimate and compare the area of shapes using a standard unit and order shapes according to their area.
44 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
45 2-D shapes Recognise and name triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and correctly name triangles according to their properties.
46 2-D shapes Using the prefix to determine polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name two-dimensional shapes such as pentagons and hexagons, using the prefix of the shapes name to determine number of angles and sides.
47 2-D shapes Spatial properties of quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to analyse and explain the spatial properties of quadrilaterals.
48 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
49 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
50 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
51 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
52 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
53 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
54 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
55 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
56 Data Pictograms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in picture graphs.
57 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
58 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
59 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
60 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
61 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
62 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
63 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
64 Exam Exam – Unit 1BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 3-4) Yr12 (Opt 2)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 1CMAT - Yr11 (Opt 4) Yr12 (Opt 3) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 1CMAT – Yr11 (Opt 4) Yr12 (Opt 3)
Objective: Assessment
2 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
3 Multiplication Multiples and factors of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to specify multiples and factors of whole numbers, and calculate the product of squared numbers.
4 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
5 Fractions Comparing and ordering fractions greater than (>) 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use diagrams, number lines and equivalent fractions to compare and order fractions greater than (>) one.
6 Fractions Subtracting fractions from whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use a diagram to subtract fractions from a whole number, develop mental strategies for subtracting fractions from whole numbers, and recognise and use the written form for subtracting fractions from
7 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
8 Fractions Fractions of whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unit fractions of a collection.
9 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
10 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
11 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
12 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
13 Area Introducing the rules for finding the area of a rectangle and a parallelogram.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to investigate areas of rectangles and parallelograms using a given formula of multiplying measurements of sides.
14 Area Finding the area of a triangle and other composite shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate areas of triangles and shapes based on triangles, rectangles and parallelograms using given formulas.
15 Volume Using the cubic centimetre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the relationship between the length, breadth, height and volume of a rectangular prism, calculate the volume of rectangular prisms, and find the volume of rectangular prisms by counting.
16 Volume Introducing the formula for volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: derive the formula for the volume of prisms, and calculate the area of prisms using the volume formula.
17 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
18 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms.
19 Volume Solving Problems about Volume – Part 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply strategies to solve problems using rectangular prisms and larger unit.
20 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
21 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
22 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
23 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
24 3-D shapes Recognise and name prisms according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise and name various prisms according to their spatial properties.
25 3-D shapes Recognise and name pyramids according to spatial properties
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, describe and name pyramids according to their spatial properties.
26 3-D shapes Recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict and recognise nets for prisms, pyramids, cubes and cones.
27 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
28 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
29 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
30 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
31 Exam Exam – Unit 1CMAT – Yr11 (Opt 4) Yr12 (Opt 3)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 1DMAT - Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 3-4) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 1DMAT – Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 3-4)
Objective: Assessment
2 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
3 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
4 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with the same denominator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions with the same denominator.
5 Fractions Adding and subtracting fractions with different denominators
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract fractions where one denominator is a multiple of the other.
6 Fractions Multiplying fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply simple fractions by whole numbers.
7 Fractions Multiplying fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply fractions and reduce the answer to its lowest form.
8 Fractions Dividing fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide fractions.
9 Decimals Adding decimals with a different number of decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add decimal numbers with different numbers of decimal places.
10 Decimals Subtracting decimals with a different number of places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to subtract decimals with different numbers of decimal places.
11 Decimals Multiplying decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are multiplied by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
12 Decimals Multiplying decimals by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals by whole numbers.
13 Decimals Multiplication of decimals by decimals to two decimal places
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to multiply decimals to two digits.
14 Decimals Dividing decimals by 10, 100 and 1000
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal numbers by one hundred and recognise the pattern formed when decimals are divided by ten, one hundred and one thousand.
15 Decimals Dividing decimal fractions by whole numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to divide decimal fractions by whole numbers.
16 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
17 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
18 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
19 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
20 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
21 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
22 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
23 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
24 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
25 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
26 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
27 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
28 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
29 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
30 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
31 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
32 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
33 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
34 Area Area of a circle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the area of a circle, and also calculate the radius and diameter of a circle.
35 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
36 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
37 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
38 Lines and angles Mapping and grid references
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify specific places on a map and use regions on a grid to locate objects or places.
39 Lines and angles Main and intermediate compass points
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use main and intermediate compass points to specify location.
40 Lines and angles Informal coordinate system
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use an informal coordinate system to specify location, and locate coordinate points on grid paper.
41 Tessellating 2-D shapes Use grids to enlarge/reduce 2D shapes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use grids to enlarge or reduce two dimensional shapes and also to recognise shapes that will and won’t tessellate.
42 3-D shapes Viewing 3-D shapes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use conventional representations of three-dimensional shapes to show depth etc when drawing or viewing shapes from various angles.
43 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
44 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
45 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
46 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
47 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
48 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
49 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
50 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
51 Data Bar Charts
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in column graphs.
52 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
53 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
54 Exam Exam – Unit 1DMAT – Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 3-4)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 1EMAT - Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 4) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 1EMAT – Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 4)
Objective: Assessment
2 Percentages Changing fractions and decimals to percentages using tenths and hundredths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change simple fractions to percentages and decimals to percentages by using place value conversion.
3 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
4 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
5 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
6 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
7 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
8 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
9 Surds Introducing surds
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and know the properties of surds as irrational numbers and be able to distinguish them from rational numbers.
10 Length Compare and convert formal units of measurement
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formal units millimetre, centimetre, metre and kilometre to measure and convert.
11 Area Larger areas: square metre, hectare, square kilometre.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate larger areas using the correct square unit.
12 Volume Using the cubic metre to measure volume.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: recognise the need for a unit larger than the cubic centimetre, use the cubic metre as a formal unit for measuring large volumes, and explain why volume is measured in cubic metres in certain situat
13 Capacity Converting between volume and capacity using millilitres and litres
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert between units of capacity.
14 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
15 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
16 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
17 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
18 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
19 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
20 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
21 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
22 Angles Measure and classify angles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise, measure and classify angles and measure the angles in a triangle.
23 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
24 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
25 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
26 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
27 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
28 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
29 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
30 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
31 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
32 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
33 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
34 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
35 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
36 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
37 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
38 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
39 Exam Exam – Unit 1EMAT – Yr11 (Opt 5) Yr12 (Opt 4)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 2AMAT - Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 2AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Rules properties Using Order of Operation procedures (BIDMAS) with Fractions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to apply the order of operations rules to simplify expressions with integers and fractions.
3 Percentages Calculating Percentages and Fractions of Quantities
Objective: To find percentages and fractions of quantities and solve problems with percentages
4 Decimals Rounding decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to round a number with one or two decimal places to the nearest whole number.
5 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
6 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
7 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
8 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
9 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
10 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
11 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
12 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
13 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
14 Algebraic expressions Algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some of the short cuts used in writing algebraic expressions, and the student will be able to write algebraic expressions down in a way that is easier to understand.
15 Algebraic expressions Substitution into algebraic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to replace pronumerals with numbers, and then perform the correct operations.
16 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to add and subtract positive and negative numbers in any combination, and understand adding and subtracting positive and negative pronumerals.
17 Algebraic expressions Directed numbers: multiplication and division.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand which combinations of signs produce a positive answer and which ones produce a negative answer.
18 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: adding like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify and evaluate numerical expressions containing patterns, and be able to simplify algebraic expressions that contain like terms.
19 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic Expressions: subtracting like terms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to recognise the difference between like and unlike terms, and be able to simplify an expression using subtraction.
20 Algebraic expressions Simplifying Algebraic expressions: combining addition and subtraction.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to approach algebraic expressions questions and avoid the most common mistakes.
21 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving multiplication of pronumerals and write them in the simplest form.
22 Algebraic expressions Simplifying algebraic expressions: division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use all the operations needed for simplifying algebraic expressions.
23 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able mentally to multiply and remove parentheses from simple algebraic expressions in one step.
24 Algebraic expressions Expanding algebraic expressions: negative multiplier
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to expand expressions using a negative multiplier.
25 Algebraic expressions Expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with expanding and simplifying algebraic expressions.
26 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing addition and subtraction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how solve simple equations involving addition and subtraction by moving everything but the pronumeral onto one side of the equation, leaving the pronumeral by itself on the other side.
27 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve simple equations involving all operations.
28 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
29 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
30 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
31 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
32 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
33 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
34 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse.
35 Pythagoras Pythagorean triples
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the 3-4-5 Pythagorean triple.
36 Pythagoras Find the hypotenuse Part 2
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of the hypotenuse using decimals and surds.
37 Pythagoras Calculating a leg of a right-angled triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate the length of one of the shorter sides of a right triangle.
38 Pythagoras Proofs of Pythagoras theorem
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will have geometric proofs for Pythagoras’ Theorem
39 Translations Transformations – reflections
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to take a pre-image and using the appropriate techniques, accurately show its image after reflection.
40 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: reflection (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use and understand the language used in geometric transformations and perform reflections in a number plane.
41 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: translation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform translations in a number plane.
42 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: rotation (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform and construct rotations.
43 Geometric transformations Geometry transformations without matrices: dilation or enlargement (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will perform the non-congruent transformation of dilation or emlargement and calculate scale factor.
44 Geometric transformations The definition and concept of combined transformations resulting in an equivalent single transformation.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will combine reflections and glide transformations to produce single isometric transformations.
45 Data Line graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in line graphs.
46 Data Pie and bar graphs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to organise, read and summarise information in pie and bar graphs.
47 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
48 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
49 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
50 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
51 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
52 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
53 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
54 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
55 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
56 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
57 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
58 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
59 Exam Exam – Unit 2AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 2BMAT - Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 2BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Number theory – operations Properties of real numbers using addition and multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the closure, identity, commutative, associative, identity and distributive properties for addition and multiplication.
3 Number theory – equations Transformations that produce equivalent equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know and use the correct terms to describe the processes in solving equations.
4 Percentages Changing percentages to fractions and decimals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change percentages to fractions and know how to change percentages to decimals.
5 Percentages One quantity as a percentage of another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find a percentage of an amount and how to express one quantity as a percentage of another.
6 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
7 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
8 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
9 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
10 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
11 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
12 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
13 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
14 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
15 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
16 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
17 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
18 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
19 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
20 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
21 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
22 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
23 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
24 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
25 Volume Finding the volume of prisms
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of prisms, calculate the volume of a variety of prisms, and explain the relationship between units of length and units of volume.
26 Volume Volume of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: calculate the volume of cylinders, spheres and hemispheres using the appropriate formulae, and use the relationship between litres and other measures of volume.
27 Volume Volume of pyramids and cones.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: use formulae to find the volume of right pyramids and cones, and calculate the volume of a variety of pyramids and cones.
28 Volume Composite solids.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to: dissect composite solids into simpler shapes so that the volume can be calculated, calculate the volume of a variety of composite solids, and use formulae appropriately.
29 Surface area Surface area of a cube/rectangular prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of different shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
30 Surface area Surface area of a triangular/trapezoidal prism.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of a number of triangular and trapezoidal shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
31 Surface area Surface area of a cylinder and sphere.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able calculate the surface area of different cylindrical and spherical shapes by applying the appropriate formula.
32 Surface area Surface area of pyramids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of pyramids.
33 Surface area Surface area of cones
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of cones by finding the area or the base ‘p r . ‘and the area of the curved surface ‘ p r l’. The student will also be able to find the slant height ‘l’ given the perpendicul
34 Surface area Surface area of composite solids
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the surface areas of Composite solids.
35 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
36 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
37 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
38 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
39 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
40 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
41 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
42 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
43 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
44 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
45 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
46 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
47 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
48 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
49 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
50 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
51 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
52 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
53 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
54 Co-ordinate Geometry-Two point formula Two point formula: equation of a line which joins a pair of points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the equation of a line given any two named points on the line.
55 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
56 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
57 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
58 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
59 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
60 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
61 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
62 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
63 Exam Exam – Unit 2BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 6) Yr12 (Opt 5)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 2CMAT - Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 2CMAT – Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
3 Scientific notation Scientific notation with larger numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers greater than 1 to scientific notation.
4 Scientific notation Scientific notation with small numbers
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers between zero and 1 to scientific notation.
5 Scientific notation Changing scientific notation to numerals
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change numbers written in scientific notation to basic numerals and be capable of solving problems on the calculator in scientific notation.
6 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
7 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
8 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
9 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
10 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
11 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
12 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
13 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
14 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
15 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
16 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
17 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
18 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
19 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
20 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
21 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
22 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
23 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
24 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
25 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
26 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
27 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
28 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
29 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
30 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
31 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
32 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
33 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
34 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
35 Sequences and Series-Compound interest Compound interest
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will understand the compound interest formula and how to use it and adjust the values of r and n, if required, for different compounding periods.
36 Coordinate Geometry-the plane Distance formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the distance between any two points on the number plane and interpret the results.
37 Co-ordinate Geometry-Intercept form Intercept form of a straight line: find the equation when given x and y
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an effective and efficient method for calculating the equation of a straight line.
38 Co-ordinate Geometry-Parallel lines equations Parallel lines: identify equation of a line parallel to another
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to decide if two or more lines are parallel or not and to solve problems involving parallel lines.
39 Co-ordinate Geometry-Perpendicular lines Perpendicular lines.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to derive the equation of a line, given that it is perpendicular to another stated line.
40 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
41 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
42 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
43 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
44 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
45 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
46 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
47 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
48 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
49 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
50 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
51 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
52 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
53 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
54 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
55 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
56 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
57 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
58 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
59 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
60 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
61 Exam Exam – Unit 2CMAT – Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 2DMAT - Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 2DMAT – Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
3 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
4 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
5 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
6 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
7 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
8 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
9 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
10 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
11 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
12 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
13 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
14 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
15 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
16 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
17 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
18 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
19 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
20 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
21 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
22 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
23 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
24 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
25 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
26 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
27 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
28 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
29 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
30 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
31 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
32 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
33 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
34 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
35 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
36 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
37 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
38 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
39 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
40 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
41 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
42 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
43 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
44 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
45 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
46 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
47 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
48 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
49 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
50 Statistics Frequency distribution table
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct a frequency distribution table for raw data and interpret the table.
51 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
52 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
53 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
54 Statistic-probability Probability of Simple Events
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand the probability of simple events.
55 Statistic-probability Rolling a pair of dice
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results when 2 dice are thrown simultaneously.
56 Statistic-probability Experimental probability
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to find the probabilities in an experimental trial.
57 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
58 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
59 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
60 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
61 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
62 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
63 Statistics – Range and dispersion Range as a measure of dispersion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range and using it in decision making.
64 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
65 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
66 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
67 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
68 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
69 Statistics Scatter Diagrams
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct scatter plots and draw conclusions from these.
70 Exam Exam – Unit 2DMAT – Yr11 (Opt 7) Yr12 (Opt 6)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3AMAT - Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Absolute value or modulus Simplifying absolute values
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving absolute values or the modulus of real numbers.
3 Significant figures Significant figures
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to observe how many significant figures are in a number and how to express a number to a certain level of significant figures.
4 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
5 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
6 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
7 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
8 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
9 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
10 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
11 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
12 Geometry-parabola The parabola: to describe properties of a parabola from its equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape and important features of a parabola and then graph the parabola to check the predictions.
13 Functions and graphs Quadratic polynomials of the form y = ax. + bx + c.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to predict the general shape of a parabola and verify the predictions by sketching the parabola. The student will also be introduced to the discriminant and the axis.
14 Functions and graphs Graphing perfect squares: y=(a-x) squared
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse a curve and then check their work by graphing the curve.
15 Graphing roots Graphing irrational roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve any polynomial which has real roots, whether they are rational or irrational.
16 Coordinate geometry Solve by graphing
Objective: On completion of the lesson students will use the slope intercept form of a line to create graphs and find points of intersection.
17 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
18 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
19 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
20 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
21 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
22 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
23 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
24 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
25 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
26 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
27 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
28 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
29 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
30 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
31 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
32 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
33 Quadratic equations Introduction to quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand simple quadratic equations.
34 Quadratic equations Quadratic equations with factorisation.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find both roots of a quadratic equation by factorising.
35 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have gained more confidence in working with quadratic equations.
36 Quadratic equations Completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of completing the square.
37 Quadratic equations Solving quadratic equations by completing the square
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the reasoning behind completing the square.
38 Quadratic equations The quadratic formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with the quadratic formula.
39 Quadratic equations Problem solving with quadratic equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to express a problem as a quadratic equation and then solve it.
40 Quadratic equations Solving simultaneous quadratic equations graphically
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will better understand why quadratic equations have two solutions and will be capable of solving quadratic equations and problems graphically..
41 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
42 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
43 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
44 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
45 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
46 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
47 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
48 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
49 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
50 Geometric Progression Given two terms of G.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to solve all problems involving finding the common ratio of a Geometric Progression.
51 Sequences and Series-Geometric means Geometric means.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make a geometric progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of geometric means.
52 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
53 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
54 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
55 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
56 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
57 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
58 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
59 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
60 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
61 Uniform motion Using subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
62 Uniform motion Uniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
63 Uniform motion Uniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
64 Uniform motion Uniform motion with unequal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, unequal distances and time.
65 Uniform motion Uniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
66 Motion under acceleration Motion under gravity – objects in vertical motion
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will convert rates and use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration.
67 Motion under acceleration Introducing initial velocity
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use equations of motion that include uniform acceleration and an initial velocity.
68 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
69 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
70 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
71 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
72 Statistics Frequency histograms and polygons
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct and interpret frequency histograms and polygons.
73 Statistics Relative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to collect, display and make judgements about data.
74 Statistics The range.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the range of data in either raw form or in a frequency distribution table.
75 Statistic-probability The mode
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the mode from raw data, a frequency distribution table and polygon.
76 Statistic-probability The mean
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate means from raw data and from a frequency table using an fx column.
77 Statistic-probability The median
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median of a set of raw scores
78 Statistic-probability Cumulative frequency
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to construct cumulative frequency columns, histograms and polygons.
79 Statistic-probability Calculating the median from a frequency distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine the median from a cumulative frequency polygon.
80 Statistics – grouped data Calculating mean, mode and median from grouped data
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of identifying class centres, get frequency counts and determine the mean and mode values.
81 Statistics using a calculator Statistics and the student calculator
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a scientific calculator in statistics mode to calculate answers to statistical problems.
82 Statistics – Spread Measures of spread
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the standard deviation, using a data set or a frequency distribution table and calculator.
83 Statistics – Standard deviation Standard deviation applications
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use standard deviation as a measure of deviation from a mean.
84 Statistics – Standard deviation Normal distribution
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the standard deviation of a normal distribution to find the percentage of scores within ranges.
85 Statistics – Interquartile range Measures of spread: the interquartile range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the upper and lower quartiles and the interquartile range
86 Statistics Stem and Leaf Plots along with Box and Whisker Plots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with vocabulary for statistics including quartiles, mode, median, range and the representation of this information on a Box and Whisker Plot.
87 Exam Exam – Unit 3AMAT – Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3BMAT - Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
3 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
4 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
5 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
6 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given its inclination, or angle to the positive direction of the x-axis; or its rise and run.
7 Coordinate Geometry-gradient Gradient formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate the gradient of a line given any two points on the line and also be capable of checking whether 3 or more points lie on the same line and what an unknown point will make to parallel lines.
8 Coordinate Geometry-straight line The straight line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which is parallel to either axis and comment on its gradient, where that gradient exists.
9 Coordinate Geometry-slope, etc. Lines through the origin.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a line which passes through the origin of the form y=mx and comment on its gradient compared to the gradients of other lines through the origin and use the information to solve problems.
10 Coordinate Geometry-equation of line General form of a line and the x and y Intercepts.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to change the equation of a straight line from the form, written as y=mx+c, into the general form and vice versa.
11 Coordinate Geometry-intercept Slope intercept form of a line.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the slope and intercept given the equation and given the slope and intercept, derive the equation.
12 Coordinate Geometry-point slope Point slope form of a line
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to derive the equation of a straight line given the gradient and a point on the line.
13 Algebraic equations Solving two step equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve two step equations.
14 Algebraic equations Solving equations containing binomial expressions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move terms in binomial equations.
15 Algebraic equations Equations involving grouping symbols.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations using grouping symbols
16 Algebraic equations Equations involving fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to solve equations using fractions.
17 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
18 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
19 Algebra-inequalities Solving Inequalities.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the ‘greater than’ and ‘less than’ signs, and be able to perform simple inequalities.
20 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
21 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
22 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
23 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
24 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
25 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
26 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
27 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
28 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
29 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
30 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
31 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
32 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
33 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
34 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
35 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
36 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
37 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
38 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
39 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
40 Calculus – Trapezoidal and Simpson’s rules The Trapezium rule and Simpson’s rule
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to calculate sub-intervals, set up a table of values, then apply the Trapezoidal Rule, or Simpson’s Rule to approximate an area beneath a curve.
41 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
42 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
43 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
44 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
45 Geometry To identify collinear points, coplanar lines and points in 2 and 3 dimensions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use correct terms to describe points, lines, intervals and rays.
46 Geometry – angles To determine angle labelling rules, naming angles according to size, angle bisector properties and related algebra
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will label angles, use a protractor and perform calculations using algebra involving angles.
47 Geometry-constructions Angle bisector construction and its properties (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to bisect an angle using a pair of compasses and a straight edge.
48 Geometry-constructions Circumcentre and incentre (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the circumcentre and incentre for a triangle and to use Pythagoras’ Theorem to calculate values.
49 Geometry-constructions Orthocentre and centroids (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able geometrically construct the orthocentre and centroid for a triangle and to use algebra to calculate values.
50 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
51 Geometry-quadrilaterals Classifying Quadrilaterals
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand the properties that classify quadrilaterals.
52 Geometry-quadrilaterals Using the Properties of a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use and prove the properties of a parallelogram.
53 Geometry-quadrilaterals Proving a Shape is a Parallelogram
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to use properties to prove a given quadrilateral is a parallelogram.
54 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Rectangle, Square and Rhombus
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the rectangle, square and rhombus for formal proofs and to find values.
55 Geometry-quadrilaterals Properties of the Trapezium and Kite
Objective: On completion of this lesson students will be able to use the properties of the trapezium and kite for formal proofs and to find values.
56 Geometry-quadrilaterals The quadrilateral family and coordinate methods in geometry
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will know the relationships between quadrilaterals and use coordinate methods to prove some of the properties.
57 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – single condition
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the term locus and describe several using a single condition.
58 Geometry-locus Constructions and loci – multiple conditions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will describe a locus that satisfies multiple conditions on a number plane.
59 Exam Exam – Unit 3BMAT – Yr11 (Opt 8-9) Yr12 (Opt 7)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3CMAT - Yr12 (Opt 8-9) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3CMAT – Yr12 (Opt 8-9)
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
3 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
4 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
5 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
6 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
7 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
8 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
9 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
10 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
11 Factorisation Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
12 Algebraic fractions-binomial Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
13 Absolute value or modulus Simplifying absolute values
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving absolute values or the modulus of real numbers.
14 Absolute value or modulus Solving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
15 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
16 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
17 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
18 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
19 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
20 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
21 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
22 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
23 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
24 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
25 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
26 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
27 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
28 Logarithms-Power of 2 Powers of 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to convert between logarithmic statements and index statements to the power of 2.
29 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
30 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
31 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
32 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
33 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
34 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
35 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
36 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
37 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
38 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
39 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
40 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
41 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
42 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
43 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
44 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
45 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
46 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
47 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
48 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
49 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
50 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
51 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – not depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of a multi stage probability problem and then finding probabilities of certain events not depending on previous outcomes.
52 Statistic-probability Tree diagrams – depending on previous outcomes
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be confident in drawing tree diagrams to list outcomes of other multi stage probability problems and then finding probabilities of certain events depending on previous outcomes.
53 Statistic-probability The complementary result ..
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of ascertaining the probability of certain results where the complementary event is involved.
54 Statistic-probability P[A or B] When A and B are both mutually and NOT mutually exclusive
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to distinguish between mutually exclusive and non mutually exclusive events and be able to find the probabilities of both.
55 Statistic-probability Binomial Theorem – Pascal’s Triangle
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will use Pascal’s triangle and the binomial theorem to write the expansion of binomial expressions raised to integer powers.
56 Statistic-probability Binomial probabilities using the Binomial Theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve certain types of probability questions using the binomial theorem
57 Statistic-probability Counting techniques and ordered selections – permutations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be competent in using some new counting techniques used for solving probability.
58 Statistic-probability Unordered selections – combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the formula, n c r both with and without a calculator and be able to use it to solve probability problems where unordered selections happen.
59 Exam Exam – Unit 3CMAT – Yr12 (Opt 8-9)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3DMAT - Yr12 (Opt 8-9) Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Self Assessment Self Assessment – Unit 3DMAT – Yr12 (Opt 8-9)
Objective: Assessment
2 Algebra- formulae Equations resulting from substitution into formulae.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to substitute into formulae and then solve the resulting equations.
3 Algebra- formulae Changing the subject of the formula.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to move pronumerals around an equation using all the rules and operations covered previously.
4 Simultaneous equns Simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the substitution method.
5 Simultaneous equns Elimination method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve 2 equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
6 Simultaneous equns Elimination method part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve all types of simultaneous equations with 2 unknown variables by the elimination method.
7 Algebra-factorising Simplifying easy algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to simplify algebraic fractions by factorising.
8 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions using the index laws.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify most algebraic fractions using different methodologies.
9 Algebra-negative indices Algebraic fractions resulting in negative indices.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to understand how to simplify an algebraic fractional expression with a negative index, and also how to write such an expression without a negative index.
10 Factorisation Factorisation of algebraic fractions including binomials.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to simplify more complex algebraic fractions using a variety of methods.
11 Algebraic fractions-binomial Cancelling binomial factors in algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be able to factorise binomials to simplify fractions.
12 Absolute value or modulus Solving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
13 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
14 Algebra-highest common factor Highest common factor.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of turning a simple algebraic expression into the product of a factor in parentheses and identifying the highest common factors of the whole expression.
15 Factors by grouping Factors by grouping.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to complete the process given just two factors for the whole expression.
16 Difference of 2 squares Difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student understand the difference of two squares and be capable of recognising the factors.
17 Common fact and diff Common factor and the difference of two squares
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be aware of common factors and recognise the difference of two squares.
18 Quadratic trinomials Quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the factorisation of quadratic trinomial equations with all terms positive.
19 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will accurately identify the process if the middle term of a quadratic trinomial is negative.
20 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 3.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an increased knowledge on factorising quadratic trinomials and will understand where the 2nd term is positive and the 3rd term is negative.
21 Factorising quads Factorising quadratic trinomials [monic] – Case 4.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to factorise all of the possible types of monic quadratic trinomials and specifcally where the 2nd term and 3rd terms are negative.
22 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of factorising any quadratic trinomial.
23 Factorising quads Factorisation of non-monic quadratic trinomials – moon method
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student know two methods for factorisation of quadratic trinomials including the cross method.
24 Sum/diff 2 cubes Sum and difference of two cubes.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be cognisant of the sum and difference of 2 cubes and be capable of factorising them.
25 Algebraic fractions Simplifying algebraic fractions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student should be familiar with all of the factorisation methods presented to this point.
26 Simultaneous equns Applications of simultaneous equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to derive simultaneous equations from a given problem and then solve those simultaneous equations.
27 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
28 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
29 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
30 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
31 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
32 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
33 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
34 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
35 Calculus – Computation volumes Computation of volumes of revolution
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will know how to choose an appropriate volume formula, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and then calculate a result to a prescribed accuracy.
36 Geometry-reasoning Further difficult exercises involving formal reasoning
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which geometric properties are needed to complete a question and be able to use formal reasoning to write out this information.
37 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 1 and 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are congruent.
38 Geometry-congruence Congruent triangles, Test 3 and 4
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify other tests to use to show two triangles are congruent.
39 Geometry-congruence Proofs and congruent triangles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to set out a formal proof to show that two triangles are congruent.
40 Similar triangles Similar triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify which test to use to show two triangles are similar.
41 Similar triangles Using similar triangles to calculate lengths
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate lengths using similar triangles.
42 Overlapping triangles Examples involving overlapping triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to calculate unknown sides in overlapping or adjacent similar triangles.
43 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
44 Circle Geometry Theorem – Equal arcs on circles of equal radii subtend equal angles at the centre. Theorem – Equal angles at the centre of a circle on equal arcs.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘Equal arcs on circles of equal radii, subtend equal angles at the centre’, and that ‘Equal angles at the centre of a circle stand on equal arcs.’ They should then be able to use these pro
45 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle at the centre of a circle is double the angle at the circumference standing on the same arc.
46 Circle Geometry Theorem – Angles in the same segment of a circle are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angles in the same segment are equal.
47 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle of a semi-circle is a right angle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The angle of a semi-circle is a right-angle.’
48 Circle Geometry Theorem – The opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the opposite angles of a cyclic quadrilateral are supplementary.
49 Circle Geometry Theorem – The tangent to a circle is perpendicular to the radius drawn to it at the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the tangent and the radius of a circle are perpendicular at the point of contact.
50 Circle Geometry Theorem – Tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that tangents to a circle from an external point are equal.
51 Circle Geometry Theorem – The angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that the angle between a tangent and a chord through the point of contact is equal to the angle in the alternate segment.
52 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
53 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
54 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
55 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
56 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
57 Circle Geometry-chords Theorem – The products of the intercepts of two intersecting chords are equal.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘The product of the intercepts of two intersecting chords are equal.’, and use this result to complete questions that require this knowledge.
58 Circle Geometry-tangents Theorem – The square of the length of the tangent from an external point is equal to the product of the intercepts of the secant passing through this point. [Including Alternate Proof]
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove and apply ‘The square of the length of the tangent from an external point is equal to the product of the intercepts of the secant passing through this point ‘, and use this result to complete q
59 Circle Geometry-cyclic quads Theorem – If the opposite angles in a quadrilateral are supplementary then the quadrilateral is cyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that a quadrilateral is cyclic using the supplementary angles theorem.
60 Circle Geometry-subtending Theorem – If an interval subtends equal angles at two points on the same side of it, then the end points of the interval and the two points are concyclic.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘ If an interval subtends equal angles at two points on the same side of it, then the end points of the interval and the two points are concyclic’, and use this result to complete the ques
61 Circle Geometry Theorem – When circles touch, the line of the centres passes through the point of contact.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘ When two circles touch, the line of the centres passes through the point of contact’, and use this result to complete questions that require it.
62 Circle Geometry-non-collinear Theorem – Any three non-collinear points lie on a unique circle whose centre is the point of concurrency of the perpendicular bisectors of the intervals joining these points.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to prove that ‘ Any three non-collinear points lie on a unique circle whose centre is the point of concurrency of the perpendicular bisectors of the intervals joining these points’, and use this knowled
63 Exam Exam – Unit 3DMAT – Yr12 (Opt 8-9)
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3AMAS - Year 11 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3AMAS – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Absolute value or modulus Simplifying absolute values
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify expressions involving absolute values or the modulus of real numbers.
3 Uniform motion Average speed
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert units for speed, distance and time.
4 Uniform motion Using subscripted variables
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, distance and time.
5 Uniform motion Uniform motion with equal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, equal distances and time.
6 Uniform motion Uniform motion adding the distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, adding distances for total distance and time.
7 Uniform motion Uniform motion with unequal distances
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use subscripted variables for calculations of speed, unequal distances and time.
8 Uniform motion Uniform motion of all types
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use all types of subscripted variables for calculations to determine speed, distance and time.
9 Geometry – triangles Triangle inequality theorem
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use the triangle inequality theorem.
10 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
11 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
12 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
13 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
14 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
15 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
16 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
17 Geometry-quadrilaterals Midsegments of Triangles
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use coordinate geometry to apply the midsegment properties of a triangle.
18 Trigonometry-ratios Trigonometric ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify the hypotenuse, adjacent and opposite sides for a given angle in a right angle triangle. The student will be able to label the side lengths in relation to a given angle e.g. the side c is op
19 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the calculator to find values for the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of acute angles.
20 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 1 Sine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine ratio to calculate lengths and distances.
21 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 2 Cosine].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine ratio to find the length of the adjacent side of a right angle triangle.
22 Trigonometry-ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find unknown length. [Case 3 Tangent Ratio].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the tangent ratio to calculate the length of the opposite side in a right angle triangle.
23 Trigonometry-ratios Unknown in the denominator. [Case 4].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to use the trig ratios to calculate lengths and distances when the denominator is unknown.
24 Trigonometry-compass Bearings – the compass.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify compass bearings, compass bearings with acute angles and 3 figure bearings from true north.
25 Trigonometry-elevation Angles of elevation and depression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify angles of depression and angles of elevation, and the relationship between them.
26 Trigonometry-practical Trigonometric ratios in practical situations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use trigonometric ratios to solve problems involving compass bearings and angles of depression and elevation.
27 Trigonometry-ratios Using the calculator to find an angle given a trigonometric ratio.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be capable of using a calculator to find the value of an unknown angle when given a trigonometric ratio.
28 Trigonometry- ratios Using the trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right-angled triangle.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the value of an unknown angle in a right angle triangle given the lengths of 2 of the sides.
29 Trigonometry-exact ratios Trigonometric ratios of 30., 45. and 60. – exact ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the exact sine, cosine and tangent ratios for the angles 30., 45.and 60.
30 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
31 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown angle. [Case 2 SSS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the size of an unknown angle of a triangle using the cosine rule given the lengths of the 3 sides.
32 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown side. Case 1.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the Sine rule to find the length of a particular side when the student is given the sizes of 2 of the angles and one of the sides.
33 Trigonometry-sine rule The sine rule to find an unknown angle. Case 2.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine rule to find an unknown angle when given 2 sides and a non-included angle.
34 Trigonometry-areas The area formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the sine formula for finding the area of a triangle given 2 sides and the included angle.
35 Rules for indices/exponents Adding indices when multiplying terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of addition of powers when multiplying terms with the same base.
36 Rules for indices/exponents Subtracting indices when dividing terms with the same base
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to use the index law of subtraction of powers when dividing terms with the same base.
37 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising a power to a power
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the law of multiplication of indices when raising a power to a power.
38 Rules for indices/exponents Multiplying indices when raising to more than one term
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the law of multiplication of indices when raising more than one term to the same power.
39 Rules for indices/exponents Terms raised to the power of zero
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to evaluate or simplify terms that are raised to the power of zero.
40 Rules for indices/exponents Negative Indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing negative indices.
41 Fractional indices/exponents Fractional indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing fractional indices.
42 Fractional indices/exponents Complex fractions as indices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to evaluate or simplify expressions containing complex fractional indices.
43 Logarithms-Log laws Laws of logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be familiar with 5 logarithm laws.
44 Logarithms-Log laws expansion Using the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the log laws to expand logarithmic expressions.
45 Logarithms-Log laws simplifying Using the log laws to simplify expressions involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify logarithmic expressions using the log laws.
46 Logarithms-Log laws numbers Using the log laws to find the logarithms of numbers.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have an enhanced understanding of the use of the log laws and be able to do more applications with numerical examples.
47 Logarithms-Equations and logs Equations involving logarithms.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations with log terms.
48 Logarithms-Logs to solve equations Using logarithms to solve equations.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use logarithms to solve index equations with the assistance of a calculator.
49 Logarithms-Change base formula Change of base formula
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have seen the change of base formula for logarithms and be capable of using it to change the logarithm of one base to another base.
50 Logarithms-Graph-log curve The graph of the logarithmic curve
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to draw a logarithmic curve to a given base and know the general properties of log curves.
51 Logarithms-Log curves Working with log curves.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems with log curves
52 Exponential function The exponential function.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to graph any equation in the form y equals a to the power x, where a is any positive real number apart from 1.
53 Log functions Logarithmic functions.
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to define basic logarithmic functions and describe the relationship between logarithms and exponents including graph logarithmic functions. The student will understand the relationship between logarit
54 Absolute value or modulus Solving for the variable
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve equations involving a single absolute value.
55 Absolute value or modulus Solving and graphing inequalities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve inequalities involving one absolute value.
56 Graphing-polynomials Graphing complex polynomials: quadratics with no real roots
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to determine whether a quadratic has real or complex roots and then graph it.
57 Graphing-polynomials General equation of a circle: determine and graph the equation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve these types of problems. Working with circles will also help the student in the topic of circle geometry, which tests the student’s skills in logic and reasoning.
58 Graphing-cubic curves Graphing cubic curves
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to graph a cubic given its equation or derive the equation of a cubic given its graph or other relevant information.
59 Absolute value equations Absolute value equations
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to relate to graphs involving the absolute value function. The student will be capable of graphing the function given its equation and be able to solve for the intersection of an absolute value functio
60 Rect.hyperbola The rectangular hyperbola.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to analyse and graph a rectangular hyperbola and describe its important features.
61 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
62 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
63 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
64 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
65 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
66 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
67 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
68 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
69 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
70 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
71 Sequences and Series General sequences.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work out a formula from a given number pattern and then be able to find particular terms of that sequence using the formula.
72 Sequences and Series Finding Tn given Sn.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the concept that the sum of n terms of a series minus the sum of n minus one terms will yield the nth term.
73 Arithmetic Progression The arithmetic progression
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is an Arithmetic Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the A.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
74 Arithmetic Progression Finding the position of a term in an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve many problems involving finding terms of an Arithmetic Progression.
75 Arithmetic Progression Given two terms of A.P., find the sequence.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find any term of an Arithmetic Progression when given two terms
76 Arithmetic Progression Arithmetic means
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to make an arithmetic progression between two given terms. This could involve finding one, two, or even larger number of arithmetic means.
77 Arithmetic Progression The sum to n terms of an A.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas for the sum of an Arithmetic Progression and how to use them in solving problems.
78 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
79 Geometric Progression Finding the position of a term in a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find terms in a geometric progression and how to apply it different types of problems.
80 Exam Exam – Unit 3AMAS – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3BMAS - Year 11 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3BMAS – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Vectors Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to represent a vector in matrix and diagrammatic form, as well as add two vectors using matrices and/or a diagram.
3 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
4 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
5 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
6 Polar coordinates Plotting polar coordinates and converting polar to rectangular
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and relate this to the rectangular coordinate system.
7 Polar coordinates Converting rectangular coordinates to polar form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the polar coordinate system and report these from rectangular coordinates.
8 Polar coordinates Write and graph points in polar form with negative vectors (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using negative angles and negative vector lengths.
9 Trig-reciprocal ratios Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to identify and use the reciprocal trigonometric ratios of sine, cosine and tan, that is, the cosecant, secant and cotangent ratios.
10 Trig complementary angles Complementary angle results.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to establish the complementary angle results for the sine and cosine ratios and then how to use these results to solve trig equations.
11 Trig identities Trigonometric identities
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to simplify trigonometrical expressions and solve trigonometry equations using the knowledge of trig identities.
12 Trig larger angles Angles of any magnitude
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find the trigonometric values of angles of any magnitude by assigning angles to the four quadrants of the circle.
13 Trig larger angles Trigonometric ratios of 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will learn how to find the Trigonometric Ratios of 0, 90, 180, 270 and 360 degrees.
14 Graph sine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – I Sine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will recognise and draw the sine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
15 Graph cosine Graphing the trigonometric ratios – II Cosine curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the cosine curve exploring changes in amplitude and period.
16 Graphs tan curve Graphing the trigonometric ratios – III Tangent curve.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the tan curve.
17 Graph reciprocals Graphing the trigonometric ratios – IV Reciprocal ratios.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will know how to recognise and draw the curves of the reciprocal ratios: cosec, sec and cot.
18 Trig larger angles Using one ratio to find another.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will find other trig ratios given one trig ratio and to work with angles of any magnitude.
19 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type I.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve simple trig equations with restricted domains.
20 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type II.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with multiples of theta and restricted domains.
21 Trig equations Solving trigonometric equations – Type III.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will solve trig equations with two trig ratios and restricted domains.
22 Trigonometry Sin(A+B) etc sum and difference identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be using the reference triangles for 30, 45 and 60 degrees with the sum and difference of angles to find additional exact values of trigonometric ratios.
23 Trigonometry Double angle formulas (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the double angle trig identities.
24 Trigonometry Half angle identities (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will derive and use the power reducing formulas and the half angle trig identities.
25 Geometric Progression The geometric progression.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to test if a given sequence is a Geometric Progression or not and be capable of finding a formula for the nth term, find any term in the G.P. and to solve problems involving these concepts.
26 Sequences and Series-Sum of gp The sum to n terms of a G.P.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the formulas and how to use them to solve problems in summing terms of a Geometric Progression (G.P).
27 Sequences and Series-Sigma notation Sigma notation
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will be familiar with the sigma notation and how it operates.
28 Sequences and Series-Sum-infinity Limiting sum or sum to infinity.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have learnt the formula for the limiting sum of a G.P., the conditions for it to exist and how to apply it to particular problems.
29 Sequences and Series-Recurring decimal infinity Recurring decimals and the infinite G.P.
Objective: On completion of the G.P. lesson the student will have understood how to convert any recurring decimal to a rational number.
30 Functions Definition, domain and range
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to select functions from relations by referring to the domain and range.
31 Functions Notation and evaluations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be understand different notations for functions.
32 Functions More on domain and range
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation.
33 Functions Domain and range from graphical representations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to describe the domain and range using appropriate set notation from graphical representations.
34 Functions Evaluating and graphing piecewise functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to evaluate and graph piecewise functions.
35 Functions Functions combinations
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform operations with functions while working with their domains.
36 Functions Composition of functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand composition of functions or a function of a function.
37 Functions Inverse functions
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to find inverse functions, use the notation correctly and the horizontal line test will be used.
38 Functions Rational functions Part 1
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to work with the division of functions and to interpret this on the coordinate number plane showing vertical and horizontal asymptotes.
39 Functions Rational functions Part 2
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the degree of polynomials and polynomial division to assist in graphing rational functions on the coordinate number plane showing vertical, horizontal and slant asymptotes.
40 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
41 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
42 Calculus Limits
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to solve problems using limiting sum rule.
43 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation from first principles.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able apply the first principles (calculus) formula to find the gradient of a tangent at any point on a continuous curve.
44 Calculus=1st prin Differentiation of y = x to the power of n.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to differentiate a number of expressions involving x raised to the power of n.
45 Calculus-differential, integ Meaning of dy over dx – equations of tangents and normals.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to apply differentiation and algebra skills to find the equation of the tangent and the normal to a point on a curve.
46 Calculus-differential, integ Function of a function rule, product rule, quotient rule.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will understand how to use the chain rule, the product rule and the quotient rule.
47 Calculus-differential, integ Increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand how to find the first derivative of various functions, and use it in various situations to identify increasing, decreasing and stationary functions.
48 Calculus First Derivative – turning points and curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first derivative to find and identify the nature of stationary points on a curve.
49 Calculus-2nd derivative The second derivative – concavity.
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to find a second derivative, and use it to find the domain over which a curve is concave up or concave down, as well as any points of inflexion.
50 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
51 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
52 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
53 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
54 Logarithms-Complex numbers Imaginary numbers and standard form
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for addition and subtraction.
55 Logarithms-Complex numbers Complex numbers – multiplication and division
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the a+bi form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
56 Logarithms-Complex numbers Plotting complex number and graphical representation
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the argand diagram to assist in the addition and subtraction of complex numbers.
57 Logarithms-Complex numbers Absolute value
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the absolute value or modulus of complex numbers
58 Exam Exam – Unit 3BMAS – Year 11 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3CMAS - Year 12 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3CMAS – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Vectors 2 vector addition in 2 and 3D (stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand and use component forms for vector resolution.
3 Calculus – Curve sketching Curve sketching
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use the first and second derivatives to find turning points of a curve, identify maxima and minima, and concavity, then use this information to sketch a curve.
4 Calculus – Maxima minima Practical applications of maxima and minima
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to apply calculus to a suite of simple maxima or minima problems.
5 Calculus – Integration Integration – anti-differentiation, primitive function
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to use rules of integration to find primitives of some simple functions.
6 Calculus – Computation area Computation of an area
Objective: On completion of the Calculus lesson the student will be able to select an appropriate formula to calculate an area, re-arrange an expression to suit the formula, and use correct limits in the formula to evaluate an area.
7 Functions Parametric equations (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to eliminate the parameter from a set of equations and identify appropriate restrictions on the domain and range.
8 Functions Polynomial addition etc in combining and simplifying functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have multiple techniques to understand and construct graphs using algebra.
9 Functions Parametric functions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand some standard parametric forms using trigonometric identities, appreciate the beauty of the the graphs that can be generated and an application to projectile motion.
10 Logic Inductive and deductive reasoning
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will understand and use the terms hypothesis, conclusion, inductive and deductive.
11 Logic Definition and use of counter examples
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to create counter examples to statements.
12 Logic Indirect proofs
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use indirect proofs by assuming the opposite of the statement being proved.
13 Logic Mathematical induction
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform the process of mathematical induction for simple series.
14 Logic Conditional statements (converse, inverse and contrapositive) (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to form related conditional statements.
15 Logarithms-Complex numbers Trigonometric form of a complex number
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will write complex numbers in trigonometric or polar form. This may also be known as mod-ard form.
16 Logarithms-Complex numbers Multiplication and division of complex numbers in trig form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use the trig form of complex numbers for multiplication and division.
17 Trigonometry-cosine rule The cosine rule to find an unknown side. [Case 1 SAS].
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to use the cosine rule to find the length of an unknown side of a triangle knowing 2 sides and the included angle.
18 Exam Exam – Unit 3CMAS – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Unit 3DMAS - Year 12 Specialist Mathematics

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Study Plan Self Assessment – Unit 3DMAS – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: On completion of the course formative assessment a tailored study plan is created identifying the lessons requiring revision.
2 Matrices Basic concepts – Matrices
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will have had an introduction to matrices
3 Matrices Addition and subtraction of matrices
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to recognise when addition and subtraction of matrices is possible, and perform these operations.
4 Matrices Scalar matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of this lesson the student will be able to perform scalar multiplication of a matrix.
5 Matrices Multiplication of one matrix by another matrix
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to state whether matrix by matrix multiplication is possible, predict the order of the answer matrix, and then perform matrix by matrix multiplication.
6 Matrices Translation in the number plane
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to place ordered pairs into a matrix, then perform translation by addition using a transformation matrix, then extract ordered pairs from an answer matrix.
7 Matrices Translation by matrix multiplication
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to convert ordered pairs to elements of a matrix, multiply matrices together, where possible, and interpret the answer matrix on a number plane.
8 Transformations Special transformations – reflections, rotations and enlargements.
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will be able to perform transformations: to rotate, reflect and change the size of various shapes and or points where applicable.
9 Simultaneous equations Number of solutions (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson of the lesson the student will identify simultaneous equations that are consistent, inconsistent or the same.
10 Linear systems Optimal solutions (Stage 2) – Vectors
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will understand the process of linear programming to find optimal solutions.
11 Linear systems Linear systems with matrices (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations.
12 Linear systems Row-echelon form (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the row-echelon form.
13 Linear systems Gauss Jordan elimination method (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will process matrices formed from linear systems of equations using the Gauss Jordan elimination method.
14 Logarithms-Complex numbers DeMoivre’s theorem (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find powers of complex numbers in trig form.
15 Logarithms-Complex numbers The nth root of real and complex numbers (Stage 2)
Objective: On completion of the lesson the student will use DeMoivre’s theorem to find roots of complex numbers in trig form.
16 Exam Exam – Unit 3DMAS – Year 12 Specialist
Objective: Exam
Go to top

Literacy

Australian National Curriculum Foundation - Kindergarten Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 It’s time to learn your A B C! The Alphabet!
Objective: Students will practise reading the letters of the alphabet and practise recognition of: a, b, c, d, e, f.
2 It’s time to learn your A B C! 1 2 3 – It’s A B C!
Objective: Students will hear and practise saying the alphabet and the numbers 1-11.
3 It’s time to learn your A B C! How do you spell that?
Objective: Students will develop their letter recognition skills by listening to a conversation. They will be able to identify the letters by name.
4 It’s time to learn your A B C! It’s time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about asking and telling the time on the hour and half hour.
5 It’s time to learn your A B C! What time is it?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by listening to a conversation about asking and telling the time. They will practise using the key sentences.
6 It’s time to learn your A B C! ‘A’ sounds like …!
Objective: Students will listen to, discriminate between and practise the sounds of the letters a, b, c, d, e, f.
7 Hello! How are you? Hello! I’m Lulu.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which they will meet some new friends.
8 Hello! How are you? My name is Jack!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which new friends and new vocabulary are introduced.
9 Eight Purple Stars! Ten Little Pandas
Objective: Students will read a picture story and practise the numbers 1-10.
10 Eight Purple Stars! What colour is it?
Objective: Students will read and practise the words for basic colours. They will learn to answer the question: ‘What colour is …?’ and reply with ‘It’s …’.
11 Fun at School Close the door, please!
Objective: Students will develop their listening and speaking skills. They will read and hear a picture story, and practise classroom instructions.
12 Fun at School This is my father and mother.
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills. They will read a picture story and become familiar with ‘This is …’ and ‘That is …’.
13 What’s this? It’s my green eraser!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story in which some possessive pronouns are used. They will also become familiar with the questions: ‘What’s this?’ and ‘What’s that?’.
14 What’s this? What’s in the box?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn to ask and answer the question ‘Is it a …?’.
15 A New Boy at School A Letter from Peter
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also revise colours and numbers, and learn to talk about their families.
16 A New Boy at School Where’s my dog?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with some prepositions.
17 My Family Where’s the red kite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading and listening to a picture story. They will also practise the use of ‘in’, ‘on’ and ‘under’.
18 My Family My Family Tree
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about the family. They will increase their vocabulary for family relationships and occupations, and they will learn to use ‘this’ and ‘that’.
19 About People That’s his cow!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about occupations. They will also learn about the possessive adjectives ‘his’, ‘her’ and ‘their’.
20 About People These are my feet.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills and vocabulary by reading a text about the parts of the body. They will practise using ‘this’ and ‘these’, and learn to form plurals.
21 Animal Mania! What animal is that?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals. Students will practise asking and answering questions, and they will revise colours and numbers.
22 Animal Mania! A Very Tall Giraffe
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about animals in which more adjectives are used.
23 We like to play games. Holidays!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about fun activities to do in the holidays. Students will practise using ‘let’s’ and learn the days of the week.
24 We like to play games. What’s your favourite?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about activities they like to do. They will learn to talk about their preferences.
25 Do you like hamburgers? At a Café
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story about food preferences.
26 Do you like hamburgers? This is Bobby.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a picture story. They will also learn to ask questions about likes and dislikes.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 1 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
2 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
3 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
4 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
5 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
6 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
7 Parts of Speech Part h Articles and Demonstratives
Objective: To identify and use articles and demonstratives correctly.
8 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
9 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
10 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
11 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
12 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
13 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
14 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! No school! It’s Sunday!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about daily routines.
15 It’s time to learn how to tell the time! Where are my clothes?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short text about items of clothing. They will learn about the prepositions – ‘on’, ‘under’, ‘in’.
16 School and Play I have lots of subjects!
Objective: Students will practise reading, and saying words and simple sentences to describe school subjects and the days of the week.
17 School and Play On the Weekend
Objective: Students will practise reading and recognising simple sentences about weekend activities.
18 It’s Christmas time! It’s time for Maths!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text in which quarter past, quarter to, 5 past, 5 to, 10 past and 10 to the hour are used.
19 It’s Christmas time! Festivals are fun!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short text about Christmas and Chinese New Year.
20 I walk in the summer. The Seasons
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words to describe the seasons.
21 I walk in the summer. How do you go to school?
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and practise new words that describe modes of transport. They will also ask and answer questions about transport to different places.
22 What’s the weather like today? Have you got a ‘W’?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which ‘have got’ is used. They will also revise the letters of the alphabet and learn some new ones.
23 What’s the weather like today? It’s a sunny day!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about the weather.
24 What are you doing now? Shhhh! Dad is sleeping!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used.
25 What are you doing now? We are having a picnic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to ask and answer questions.
26 They’re usually in the lounge room. Hide and Seek
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story about finding people.
27 They’re usually in the lounge room. An Unusual Day
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the simple present and the continuous present tenses are used. They will also learn the little words that help to sequence a story.
28 Left! Right! Let’s go! Where’s the shop?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which simple directions are given using the imperative.
29 Left! Right! Let’s go! Ladies and Gentlemen!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which the present continuous tense is used to talk about a concert.
30 Up, down and around we go! Roller-coaster Ride
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which routes are described using the present continuous tense.
31 Up, down and around we go! Catch that car!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story which focuses on street directions and places.
32 Sentences The Sentence
Objective: To identify and use complete sentences.
33 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
34 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
35 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
36 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
37 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 2 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
2 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
3 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
4 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
7 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
8 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
9 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
10 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
11 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
12 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
13 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
14 Spelling Spelling
Objective: To use the ‘Look, Say, Write’ method for learning spelling. Plus 300 spelling words.
15 We’re very busy. Fast Food
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading what Peter and Chen say about fast food. They will also practise using the present tense, and asking and answering questions using ‘do’.
16 We’re very busy. On the farm
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading, in which the present continuous tense is used.
17 I can’t do that! This is a great park!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a story about a park. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘this’ and ‘these’ for things that are near and ‘that’ and ‘those’ for things that are far away.
18 I can’t do that! I can speak English!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a short speech about what a person ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ do.
19 Can I look at your new kite? Can I help you?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text using ‘can’ and ‘can’t’ to make offers and requests.
20 Can I look at your new kite? I’ve got a secret!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘has’ and ‘have got’ are used to talk about possessions.
21 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! Doctor, what have I got?
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text about illnesses.
22 Oh, no! Not the Doctor! There is a zoo in Sydney!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘There is’ and ‘There are’ in relation to zoo animals is used.
23 It’s all in the future! One World, One Dream
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to talk about the future.
24 It’s all in the future! You are going to have a great time!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills by reading a text in which ‘going to’ is used to make future plans.
25 Maybe she’ll be funny! My animal friends are wonderful!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will revise adjectives that describe personality.
26 Maybe she’ll be funny! What will Fido do next?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ to express a future action.
27 First we’ll see a big city. Sydney: It’s special!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will focus on the use of adjectives to describe cities.
28 First we’ll see a big city. Then we’ll eat it!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘will’ when describing a process.
29 We need to take a metal pan. What’s it made of?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about what things are made of. They will also revise prepositions of location.
30 We need to take a metal pan. They want to go camping.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about a camping trip. They will also become familiar with the terms ‘need to’ and ‘want to’.
31 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Let’s make pancakes!
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, an illustrated recipe. They will also revise words that help them tell a story – ‘First’, ‘Then’, ‘Next’, ‘After that’ and ‘Finally’.
32 First we’ll go to the eighth floor. Who’s shopping at Sunsets?
Objective: Students will develop their language skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story about shopping in a department store. They will also revise some prepositions and learn some more in simple phrases.
33 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Whose Shoes?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture poem about shopping. They will also revise colours and pronouns.
34 On Monday I’ll buy new jeans. Chen’s Holiday Plans
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a short story about Chen’s plans for his holidays. They will also practise verbs.
35 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
36 Basic Dictionary Use Basic Dictionary Use
Objective: To find words arranged alphabetically and identify word meanings in dictionaries.
37 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 3 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
2 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
3 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
4 Common Nouns Common Nouns
Objective: To show a common noun names an object or thing.
5 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
8 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
9 Contractions Contractions
Objective: To identify and use contractions.
10 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
11 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
12 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
13 Thanks and goodbye Time clauses
Objective: Learn how to use time clauses.
14 Verbs Simple Verbs
Objective: To identify and use verbs. To understand a verb can be: an action or doing word, a state of being or ownership.
15 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
16 Simple and Compound Verbs Simple and Compound Verbs
Objective: To identify and use simple and compound verbs.
17 Auxiliary Verbs Auxiliary Verbs
Objective: To identify and use auxiliary verbs within compound verbs.
18 Regular and Irregular Verbs Regular and Irregular Verbs
Objective: To identify and use regular and irregular verbs in the present and past tense.
19 Verbs – Infinitives Verbs – Infinitives
Objective: To identify and use the infinitive form of the verb.
20 What’s Homestay? Simple Present
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the simple present.
21 Setting off Present perfect
Objective: Learn the correct structure for the present perfect.
22 Amazing Aussie animals Present continuous
Objective: Learn about the present continuous tense.
23 Amazing Aussie animals Past continuous
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
24 Big day out! The future with ‘will’ and ‘going to’
Objective: Learn the uses of ‘will’ and ‘going to’ to talk about the future.
25 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
28 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
29 What do you like to do? Adverbs of frequency
Objective: Learn about the past continuous tense.
30 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
31 Vowels and Consonants Vowels and Consonants
Objective: To identify and use vowels and consonants.
32 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
33 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
34 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
35 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
36 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
37 What do you like to do? Expressing likes and dislikes
Objective: Present phrases used to express likes and dislikes.
38 Other Places and Other Times A New Penfriend
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehensions skills by reading a letter of introduction to a penfriend. They will also practise the present continuous tense and become familiar with vocabulary about different nationalities.
39 Other Places and Other Times Will we have robots?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the future tense is used.
40 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
41 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
42 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 4 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
3 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
4 Thanks and goodbye Talking about feelings
Objective: Present constructions for talking about feelings.
5 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
6 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
7 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
8 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
9 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
12 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
13 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
14 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
15 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
16 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
17 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
18 Here we are! Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
19 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
20 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
21 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
22 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
23 A new home Prepositions of location
Objective: Learn about prepositions of location.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
26 Vowels Vowels – Long and Short
Objective: To identify long and short vowel sounds, and their use.
27 Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs Homonyms – Homophones and Homographs
Objective: To identify and use correctly homonyms, both homophones and homographs.
28 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
29 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
30 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
31 Adjectives Adjectives – from Nouns and Verbs
Objective: To create adjectives from nouns and verbs. E.g. China – Chinese
32 Adjectives Adjectives – Comparatives and Superlatives
Objective: To identify and use comparative and superlative adjectives.
33 Here we are! Comparatives and superlatives
Objective: Learn how to use comparatives and superlatives in English.
34 Setting off Questions
Objective: Learn the correct structure for forming yes/no questions. Learn the correct structure for forming wh questions.
35 Here we are! Asking for repetition
Objective: Learn how to ask someone to repeat something in English.
36 A new home Offers and requests
Objective: Present the phrases used to make offers and requests.
37 Amazing Aussie animals Giving facts and opinions
Objective: Present phrases that ask for and give opinions.
38 There weren’t many … There weren’t any flowers!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the simple past tense of the verb ‘to be’.
39 There weren’t many … A Shopping List
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise asking questions using ‘How much …’ and ‘How many …’.
40 It couldn’t be mine! Uncle Bill said we could!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’ to refer to past events.
41 It couldn’t be mine! The Riding Lesson
Objective: Students will build vocabulary, answer comprehension questions and practise using possessive pronouns and adjectives.
42 Clean up Australia! Too much rubbish!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
43 Clean up Australia! Sports Report
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and reading comprehension skills. They will also practise using the adverbs ‘well’ and ‘badly’.
44 Friends all over the World Now I can do it by myself.
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary and develop their reading skills. They will practise using ‘too much’, ‘too many’ and ‘enough’.
45 Friends all over the World A Letter to a Pen Pal
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their comprehension skills and practise using the simple present tense.
46 What’s the problem? What’s the matter?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a passage in which words are used to describe feelings.
47 What’s the problem? A School Outing
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a notice. They will learn about the use of ‘should’ and ‘shouldn’t’.
48 When I was Young Life used to be different.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, an interview. They will learn how to describe finished activities using ‘used to’.
49 When I was Young Have you tidied your room?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will also learn the imperfect tense and its use.
50 Space and Time We’ve done our research.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a picture story. They will learn some irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
51 Space and Time We’ve written a poem!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a rhyme. They will learn more irregular verbs in the present perfect tense.
52 Choices and Places A New Jacket
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which preferences are discussed and comparisons are made.
53 Choices and Places He has travelled a lot.
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the present perfect and the simple past tenses are used.
54 What’s the best way to do it? A Text Message
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text which focuses on the use of ‘have to’ and adverbs of time.
55 What’s the best way to do it? What will we make?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which the children discuss a project.
56 Class Camp Dear Parents, …
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which uses a variety of verb tenses.
57 Class Camp A Postcard from Kate
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading an informal letter in which the simple past tense of the verb is used.
58 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
61 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
62 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
63 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
64 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
65 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
66 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
67 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
68 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
69 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
70 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
71 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
72 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
73 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
74 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
75 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
76 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
77 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 5 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
2 Nouns Proper Nouns
Objective: To show a proper noun is used to name a person, place or a title.
3 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
6 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
7 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
8 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
9 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
10 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
11 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
12 Thanks and goodbye Adjectives
Objective: Learn the use of adjectives.
13 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
14 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
15 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
16 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
17 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
18 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
22 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
23 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
24 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
25 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
26 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
27 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
28 There’s a … It’s famous!
Objective: Students will increase their vocabulary, develop their reading skills and practise using the verb ‘to be’.
29 There’s a … There are lots of things in my town.
Objective: Students will increase their reading comprehension skills and their vocabulary. They will also become familiar with the use of ‘There is …’ and ‘There are …’.
30 Hobbies and Festivals Collecting things
Objective: Students will develop their reading skills and increase their vocabulary. They will learn the verb ‘to have’. They will also learn to use ‘this’ and ‘these’ correctly.
31 Hobbies and Festivals My favourite festival
Objective: Students will build vocabulary; begin to use conjunctions ‘and’, ‘but’ or ‘because’.
32 What can you do? Letter to a penfriend
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand an informal letter and use the present tense of ‘can’ and ‘can’t’.
33 What can you do? Have you got everything?
Objective: Students will read and comprehend a written text using ‘have’, ‘haven’t got’, ‘but’ or ‘and’.
34 A visit to the Zoo About Koalas
Objective: Students will be able to answer questions about the text, identify the target language point ‘like’ + the infinitive) and distinguish between simple facts and opinions.
35 A visit to the Zoo I’m a zookeeper.
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions on reading, increase their vocabulary and use the frequency adverbs, ‘always’, ‘sometimes’, ‘often’ and ‘never’.
36 What do you want to do? Big Dreams
Objective: Students will be able to answer comprehension questions, increase their vocabulary and be able to use ‘want’ + the infinitive in positive and negative sentences, and in a question.
37 What do you want to do? Fruit Bowl
Objective: Students will be able to read and understand the text, to answer questions and to notice the use of the imperative form.
38 It’s going to be fun! It’s going to be fantastic!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading, and listening to, a story. They will learn how to talk about the future using the verb ‘to go + the infinitive’.
39 It’s going to be fun! What’s on the menu?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading various menus. They will also learn to ask questions politely.
40 We are all doing things! I’m having a great time!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a letter which focuses on the use of the present continuous tense.
41 We are all doing things! Who can help me?
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a story in which requests for help are made.
42 To Australia and Back! Getting There!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about travel plans. They will also learn about coordinate conjunctions.
43 To Australia and Back! I came back!
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text in which Chen talks about going home to China. They will also revise the simple past tense.
44 Famous People Bruce Lee
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Bruce Lee. They will also practise the use of the simple past tense and learn more irregular verbs.
45 Famous People Alexander Bell
Objective: Students will develop their comprehension skills by reading a text about Alexander Bell. They will also learn how to use ‘could’ and ‘couldn’t’, and review questions using ‘Wh’ words.
46 Finding Buster! Finding Buster! – A Movie Review
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills and increase their vocabulary by reading a movie review. They will also learn how to use the conjunction ‘because’ to answer ‘why’ questions.
47 Finding Buster! I’m going to be busy!
Objective: Students will develop their reading comprehension skills by reading a story about plans for the weekend. They will revise the use of the verb ‘to go’ in the present tense + the infinitive to talk about the future.
48 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
49 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
50 Capitalisation Capital Letters 1
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: to begin sentences, for proper nouns.
51 Punctuation Sentence Endings
Objective: To use full-stops, question marks, exclamation marks and capital letters correctly.
52 Capitalisation Capital Letters 2
Objective: To use capital letters correctly: in titles and letters.
53 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
54 Common Errors Common Errors in spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
55 Common Errors Common Errors in writing
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
56 Common Errors Common Errors in verb usage, spelling and punctuation
Objective: To identify and eliminate common errors.
57 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
58 Vocabulary Development Vocabulary
Objective: To identify and use better words than ‘got’ and ‘said’.
59 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
60 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
61 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
62 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
63 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
64 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 6 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns
Objective: To show a pronoun is used in place of a noun.
2 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
3 Punctuation Commas 1
Objective: To use commas: to list, to make meaning clear, and when writing the date.
4 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
7 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
8 Verb tense – Compound Verb tense – Compound
Objective: To identify and use ‘to be’ and ‘to have’ with the appropriate participle of the main verb.
9 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
10 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
11 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
12 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
13 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
14 Spelling Skills Syllabification
Objective: To improve spelling by dividing words correctly into syllables.
15 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
16 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
17 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
18 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
19 Gerunds Gerunds
Objective: To identify and use gerunds.
20 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
21 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
22 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
23 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
24 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
25 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
26 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
30 Spelling Skills Word Usage
Objective: To correctly choose words with similar spelling, sound and meaning.
31 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
32 Have you met? Hello!
Objective: Use the present tense verb to be (am, is and are) correctly in written and spoken work. Answer comprehension questions and apply am, is and are correctly.
33 Have you met? The world in a classroom!
Objective: At the end of this lesson, students will have learnt how to ask a question in English, and how to use the definite and indefinite articles.
34 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
35 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
36 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
37 Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives Participles – as Verbs and Adjectives
Objective: To identify and use participles as verbs or adjectives as indicators of continuing action.
38 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
39 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
40 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
41 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
42 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 7 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Mnemonics Spelling – Mnemonics
Objective: To identify and use mnemonics to assist in correct spelling.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
4 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
5 Parts of Speech Part a Prepositions
Objective: To identify and use prepositions correctly.
6 Parts of Speech Part b Conjunctions
Objective: To identify and use conjunctions correctly.
7 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
8 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
9 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
10 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
11 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
12 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
13 Apostrophe – Possession Apostrophe – Possession
Objective: To use the apostrophe of possession correctly.
14 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
15 Interjections Interjections
Objective: To identify and use interjections correctly.
16 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
17 Sentence Structure Part a Subject and Predicate
Objective: To identify the subject and predicate within a sentence and to understand they are the two main parts of a sentence.
18 Modal Verbs Modal Verbs
Objective: To identify and use modal verbs with the appropriate form of the main verb.
19 Adjectives Adjectives
Objective: To show an adjective is a word that describes a noun.
20 Adverbs Adverbs
Objective: To identify and use adverbs. To understand an adverb tells something about (modifies) a verb.
21 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
22 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
23 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
24 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
25 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
26 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
27 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
28 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
29 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
30 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
31 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 8 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
2 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
3 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
4 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
5 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
6 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
7 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
8 Punctuation Punctuation – Various
Objective: To use hyphens, dashes, apostrophes, quotation marks, parentheses and brackets correctly.
9 Commas 2 Commas 2
Objective: To use commas: to separate places, to separate clauses within sentences, and when using direct speech.
10 Punctuation Skills Part b Quotation Marks
Objective: To use quotation marks for direct speech.
11 Phrases Phrases
Objective: To identify and use phrases including adjectival and adverbial phrases.
12 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
13 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
14 Transitive and Intransitive Verbs Transitive and Intransitive Verbs
Objective: To identify and use transitive and intransitive verbs.
15 Case – Nouns and Pronouns Case – Nouns, Pronouns and Possessive Adjectives
Objective: To identify the case of nouns and pronouns.
16 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
17 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
20 Plurals Plurals 1 – simple
Objective: To form plurals (more than one) by adding ‘s’ and ‘es’ correctly.
21 Plurals Plurals 2 – special rules
Objective: To form plurals with special rules: words ending in ‘y’ and ‘f’.
22 Plurals Plurals 3 – Unusual
Objective: To create unusual plurals: for words ending in ‘o’; by changing the vowels or by adding letters.
23 Plurals Plurals 4 – Unusual
Objective: To use nouns whose singular and plural forms are the same. To use compound noun plurals.
24 Plurals of Foreign Nouns Plurals 5 – Foreign
Objective: To form plurals of foreign nouns.
25 Spelling Skills Spelling
Objective: To correctly spell words after adding suffixes: ‘ing’, ‘ed’, ‘er’, ‘est’.
26 Prefixes Prefixes
Objective: The identify and use prefixes.
27 Suffixes Suffixes
Objective: The identify and use suffixes.
28 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
29 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
30 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
31 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
32 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
33 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
34 Advanced Dictionary Use Advanced Dictionary Use
Objective: To use dictionaries by identifying all the information provided. To use a thesaurus.
35 Antonyms and Synonyms Antonyms and Synonyms
Objective: To identify and use antonyms and synonyms.
36 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
37 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
38 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 9 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
2 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
3 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
4 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
5 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
6 Big day out! First and second conditionals
Objective: Learn the use of first conditionals. Learn the use of second conditionals.
7 BBQ Party! Sequence markers
Objective: Learn the words used in sequences or ordering.
8 Mass and Count Nouns Determiners
Objective: To identify and use determiners correctly with mass and count nouns.
9 Let’s hit the beach! Modals of obligation
Objective: Learn about modals of obligation.
10 Let’s hit the beach! Imperatives
Objective: Learn how to use imperatives.
11 Colons and Semi-Colons Colons and Semi-Colons
Objective: To use colons and semi-colons correctly.
12 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
13 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
14 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
15 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
16 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
17 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
19 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
20 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
21 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
22 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
23 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
24 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
25 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
26 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
27 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
28 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
29 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
30 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
31 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
32 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
33 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
34 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top

Australian National Curriculum Year 10 Literacy

# TOPIC TITLE
1 Pronouns Pronouns 2
Objective: To recognise and use personal, possessive and relative pronouns.
2 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
3 Verbs – Active and Passive voice Verbs – Active and Passive voice
Objective: To identify and use active and passive voice.
4 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
5 Clauses Clauses
Objective: To identify and use clauses including adjectival, adverbial and noun clauses.
6 Nouns Collective and Abstract Nouns
Objective: To identify and use collective and abstract nouns.
7 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
8 Similes and Metaphors Similes and Metaphors
Objective: To identify and use similes and metaphors.
9 Figurative Language Symbolism and Personification
Objective: To identify, and make use of, symbolism and personification.
10 Figurative Language Onomatopoeia, Assonance and Alliteration
Objective: To identify, and make use of, onomatopoeia, assonance, and alliteration.
11 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
12 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
13 Essay Writing 2 Essay Writing 2
Objective: To develop and write essays.
14 Verbs Verbs – Tense
Objective: To identify and use the correct tense of verbs: past, present and future.
15 Conjunctions – Sentences Conjunctions – Sentences
Objective: To use conjunctions to increase the variety of sentence structure in written expression.
16 Sentence Improvement Sentence Improvement
Objective: To construct expressive sentences by using adjectives, adverbs, phrases and clauses.
17 Variety of Expression Sentence Construction
Objective: To construct expressive and precise sentences to improve meaning.
18 Review of Figures of Speech Review of Figures of Speech
Objective: To identify multiple uses of figures of speech within writing.
Go to top